244
BSC6900 UMTS V900R011C00 Hardware Description Issue 10 Date 2012-06-30 HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 1/243

BSC6900 UMTS

V900R011C00

Hardware Description

Issue 10

Date 2012-06-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 2/243

 

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written

consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

 

Notice

The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the

customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the

purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations

of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the

preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and

recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

 

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

 Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang

Shenzhen 518129

People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 3/243

About This Document

Overview

This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users witha detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version

The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R011C00

 

Intended Audience

This document is intended for:

l Installers

l Site operators

Organization

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.

3 Cabinet

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 4/243

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable

trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an

independent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,

 performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.

 

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 5/243

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface  Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in

boldface. For example, log in as user root.

 Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in

Courier New.

 

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

 Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all

items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by

vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

 

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK .

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

 

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 6/243

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt

+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means

the two keys should be pressed in turn.

 

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving

the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and

quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the

 pointer to a certain position.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description About This Document

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

v

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 7/243

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description........................................................1

2 Physical Structure..........................................................................................................................8

3 Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................10

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet...............................................................................................................................11

3.2 Classification of Cabinets.................................................................................................................................13

3.3 Components of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................14

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................15

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet....................................................................................................................17

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components..................................................................17

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet............................................................19

3.5.3 Distr ibution of Signal Cables for the MPR.............................................................................................23

3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR...............................................................................................29

4 Components of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................35

4.1 Power Distribution Box....................................................................................................................................36

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box.............................................................................................36

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box..............................................................................................37

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box........................................................................38

4.1.4 Distr ibution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box.............................................................39

4.2 Air Defence Subrack........................................................................................................................................39

4.3 Rear Cable Trough............................................................................................................................................40

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack.................................................................................................................................40

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack..........................................................................................41

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack......................................................................42

5 Subracks........................................................................................................................................43

5.1 Classification of Subracks................................................................................................................................44

5.2 Components of the Subrack..............................................................................................................................44

5.3 Fan Box.............................................................................................................................................................46

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)..........................................................................................46

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)..........................................................................................49

5.4 Slots in the Subrack..........................................................................................................................................51

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 8/243

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...............................................................................................................................52

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack...........................................................................................................................54

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS........................................................................................................................54

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.........................................................................................................................55

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack...........................................................................................................55

6 Boards............................................................................................................................................57

6.1 AEUa Board.....................................................................................................................................................62

6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board.................................................................................................................62

6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................62

6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board.......................................................................................................................63

6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board........................................................................................................................64

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board...........................................................................................................64

6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board..........................................................................................67

6.2 AOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................................68

6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board.................................................................................................................69

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................69

6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board.......................................................................................................................70

6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board........................................................................................................................71

6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board..........................................................................................................71

6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board.........................................................................................73

6.3 AOUc Board.....................................................................................................................................................75

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board.................................................................................................................76

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................76

6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board.......................................................................................................................77

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board........................................................................................................................78

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board.........................................................................................79

6.4 DPUb Board.....................................................................................................................................................81

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb Board.................................................................................................................82

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board........................................................................................................................82

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board.......................................................................................................................83

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board..........................................................................................84

6.5 DPUe Board......................................................................................................................................................856.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board..................................................................................................................85

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board.........................................................................................................................85

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board.......................................................................................................................86

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board..........................................................................................87

6.6 FG2a Board.......................................................................................................................................................88

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...................................................................................................................88

6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................88

6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board........................................................................................................................89

6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................90

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board...........................................................................................91

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 9/243

6.7 FG2c Board.......................................................................................................................................................92

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...................................................................................................................92

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................93

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board........................................................................................................................94

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................95

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board...........................................................................................95

6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board..........................................................................................................................................97

6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board......................................................................................................97

6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................97

6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................................................98

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................99

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................100

6.9 GOUa Board...................................................................................................................................................100

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board...............................................................................................................100

6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................101

6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................101

6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................102

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board.......................................................................................102

6.10 GOUc Board.................................................................................................................................................105

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board.............................................................................................................105

6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board....................................................................................................................105

6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................106

6.10.4 Por ts on the GOUc Board....................................................................................................................1076.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board.....................................................................................107

6.11 OMUa Boar d................................................................................................................................................110

6.11.1 Functions of the OMUa Board............................................................................................................110

6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa Board...................................................................................................................110

6.11.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board..................................................................................................................112

6.11.4 Por ts on the OMUa Board...................................................................................................................113

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board.....................................................................................113

6.12 PAMU Boar d................................................................................................................................................115

6.12.1 Functions of the PAMU Board............................................................................................................115

6.12.2 Panel of the PAMU Board...................................................................................................................115

6.12.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board..................................................................................................................116

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board........................................................................................................116

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board....................................................................................117

6.13 PEUa Board..................................................................................................................................................117

6.13.1 Functions of the PEUa Board..............................................................................................................118

6.13.2 Panel of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................................................118

6.13.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................119

6.13.4 Por ts on the PEUa Board.....................................................................................................................119

6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................120

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 10/243

6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.......................................................................................122

6.14 PFCU Board.................................................................................................................................................124

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCU Board.............................................................................................................124

6.14.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board..........................................................................................................124

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board......................................................................................126

6.15 PFCB Board..................................................................................................................................................126

6.15.1 Functions of the PFCB Board..............................................................................................................126

6.15.2 Pins on the PFCB Board......................................................................................................................126

6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board......................................................................................128

6.16 POUa Board..................................................................................................................................................128

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board..............................................................................................................128

6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board.....................................................................................................................129

6.16.3 LEDs on the POUa Board...................................................................................................................129

6.16.4 Ports on the POUa Board.....................................................................................................................130

6.16.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board.......................................................................................................131

6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board......................................................................................132

6.17 POUc Board..................................................................................................................................................134

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board..............................................................................................................135

6.17.2 Panel of the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................135

6.17.3 LEDs on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................136

6.17.4 Ports on the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................137

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board......................................................................................138

6.18 SCUa Board..................................................................................................................................................1406.18.1 Functions of the SCUa Board..............................................................................................................140

6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................................................140

6.18.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board....................................................................................................................141

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board.....................................................................................................................142

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board......................................................................................143

6.19 SPUa Board..................................................................................................................................................144

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board..............................................................................................................144

6.19.2 Panel of the SPUa Board.....................................................................................................................145

6.19.3 LEDs on the SPUa Board....................................................................................................................146

6.19.4 Ports on the SPUa Board.....................................................................................................................147

6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board.......................................................................................147

6.20 SPUb Board..................................................................................................................................................148

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board..............................................................................................................148

6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb Board.....................................................................................................................149

6.20.3 LEDs on the SPUb Board....................................................................................................................150

6.20.4 Ports on the SPUb Board.....................................................................................................................151

6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board......................................................................................151

6.21 UOIa Board...................................................................................................................................................152

6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board...............................................................................................................152

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 11/243

6.21.2 Panel of the UOIa Board.....................................................................................................................153

6.21.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board....................................................................................................................153

6.21.4 Ports on the UOIa Board.....................................................................................................................154

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board.......................................................................................154

6.22 UOIc Board...................................................................................................................................................157

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board...............................................................................................................157

6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board.....................................................................................................................157

6.22.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board....................................................................................................................158

6.22.4 Por ts on the UOIc Board.....................................................................................................................159

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board.......................................................................................159

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................163

7.1 Power Ca bles..................................................................................................................................................165

7.2 PGND Ca bles.......................................................................... .......................................................................168

7.3 Optical Ca ble..................................................................................................................................................170

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner...............................................................................................................................171

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable....................................................................................................................................174

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable..........................................................................................................176

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable..........................................................................................................................179

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable................................................................................................181

7.9 BITS Clock Cable...........................................................................................................................................184

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable.................................................................................................................................186

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................188

7.12 Straight-Through Cable................................................................................................................................1887.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack.........................................................................191

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable...............................................................................................................................192

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box............................................................................193

7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable...................................................................................................................195

7.17 OMU ser ial port cable..................................................................................................................................196

7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable............................................................................................................196

8 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................198

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board..............................................................................................................................200

8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board..............................................................................................................................2008.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board..............................................................................................................................201

8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board..............................................................................................................................201

8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board..............................................................................................................................202

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................................203

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................................203

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................................204

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................................205

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................205

8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board...........................................................................................................................206

8.12 LEDs on the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................................207

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

x

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 12/243

8.13 LEDs on the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................................208

8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board............................................................................................................................208

8.15 LEDs on the POUc Board............................................................................................................................209

8.16 LEDs on the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................................209

8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board.............................................................................................................................210

8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board.............................................................................................................................211

8.19 LEDs on the UOIa Board.............................................................................................................................212

8.20 LEDs on the UOIc Board.............................................................................................................................212

9 DIP Switches on Components................................................................................................ 214

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................215

9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board..................................................................................................................217

9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board.................................................................................................................220

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board...................................................................................................................222

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board..................................................................................................................223

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.....................................................................................................................226

9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board.................................................................................................................................228

9.8 DIP Switches on the POUa Board..................................................................................................................229

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description Contents

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 13/243

1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware

Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description.

10(2012-06-30)

This is the tenth commercial release.

Compared with issue 09 (2011-05-25) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new

topics.

Compared with issue 09 (2011-05-25) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Table 1-1 Change Description

Topic Change Description

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board

6.11.4 Ports on the OMUa Board

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board

Added the descriptions about security for 

serial ports and USB ports.

 

Compared with issue 09 (2011-05-25) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

09 (2011-05-25)

This is the ninth commercial release.

Compared with issue 08 (2011-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner

Compared with issue 08 (2011-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 14/243

Topic Change Description

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board

Modified the meaning of the ACT indicator.

6.19.5 Technical Specifications

of the SPUa Board

6.20.5 Technical Specifications

of the SPUb Board

Modified technical specifications of boards.

6 Boards Supplemented the number of UDP ports or CIDs for the

following interface boards: AEUa, AOUa, UOIa, PEUa,

POUa, GOUa, FG2a, AOUc, UOIc, POUc, GOUc, and

FG2c.

6 Boards Supplemented the prerequisites for the specifications of 

the following boards: AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, DPUb,

DPUe, FG2a, FG2c, GOUa, GOUc, PEUa, POUa, POUc,

UOIa, and UOIc.

6 Boards Supplemented the number of connections for the

following boards: AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, FG2a, FG2c,

GOUa, GOUc, PEUa, POUa, POUc, UOIa, and UOIc.

6 Boards Supplemented the specifications of UDP ports or CIDs

for interface boards.

 

Compared with issue 08 (2011-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

08 (2011-01-30)

This is the eighth commercial release.

Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new

topics.

Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power

Distribution Box

Modified the figure of the rear panel of the high-power 

 power distribution box.

7.18 EMU RS485

Communication Cable

Modified the installation of EMU RS485 communication

cable.

 

Compared with issue 07 (2010-09-15) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 15/243

07 (2010-09-15)

This is the seventh commercial release.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new

topics.

Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6.19.5 Technical Specifications

of the SPUa Board

Modified the information about the processing capability

of the main control SPUa board and the non-main control

SPUa board.

 

Compared with issue 06 (2010-05-31) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

06 (2010-05-31)

This is the sixth commercial release.

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l 7.17 OMU serial port cable

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:

Topic Change Description

6.4 DPUb Board Modified the description about the slots for the DPUb

 board.

6.5 DPUe Board Modified the description about the slots for the DPUe

 board.

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board Modified the description about the ports on SCUa board.

 

Compared with issue 05 (2010-03-25) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2010-03-25)

This is the fifth commercial release.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any new

topics.

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 16/243

Topic Change Description

DIP Switch on the Subrack Optimized the figure of the setting of the DIP

Switch.

7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable Optimized the figure of the EMU RS485communication cable.

 

Compared with issue 04 (2010-01-30) of V900R 011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2010-01-30)

This is the fourth commercial release.

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not include any newtopics.

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6 Boards Modified the description about the logical

function of the DPUb board.

 

Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2009-12-05)

This is the third commercial release.

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc Board,6.7.2 Panel

of the FG2c Board,6.10.2 Panel of the

GOUc Board,6.17.2 Panel of the POUc

Board,6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board

Modified the figures of the panel of the AOUc

 board, FG2c board, GOUc board, POUc

 board, and UOIc board.

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board,6.7.4 Ports

on the FG2c Board,6.10.4 Ports on the

GOUc Board,6.17.4 Ports on the POUc

Board,6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board

Deleted the description about the 2M0 and

2M1 ports of the AOUc board, FG2c board,

GOUc board, POUc board, and UOIc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 17/243

Topic Change Description

DIP Switch on the Subrack Modified the description about bit 8 of the

DIP switch on the subrack.

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board,6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

Optimized the description about DIPSwitches on the AEUa board and PEUa

 board.

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board,6.6.2 Panel

of the FG2a Board,6.8.2 Panel of the

GCUa/GCGa Board,6.9.2 Panel of the

GOUa Board,6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa

Board,6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board,

6.18.2 Panel of the SCUa Board,6.21.2

Panel of the UOIa Board,6.19.2 Panel of 

the SPUa Board,6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb

Board

Optimized the figures of the panel of the

AOUa board, FG2a board, GCUa/GCGa

 board, GOUa board, OMUa board, POUa

 board, SCUa board, UOIa board, SPUa

 board, and SPUb board.

DIP Switch on the Subrack Optimized the figure of the cover plate for the

DIP switch on the subrack.

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc

Board,6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the

FG2a Board,6.9.5 Technical Specifications

of the GOUa Board,6.7.5 Technical

Specifications of the FG2c Board,6.10.5

Technical Specifications of the GOUc

Board,6.21.5 Technical Specifications of 

the UOIa Board,6.22.5 TechnicalSpecifications of the UOIc Board,6.17.5

Technical Specifications of the POUc

Board

Optimized the description about technical

specifications of the AOUc board, FG2a

 board, GOUa board, FG2c board, GOUc

 board, UOIa board, UOIc board, and POUc

 board.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet Modified the figure about the physical

appearance of the N68-21-N cabinet. In

addition, changed the cabinet model name

 N68-21-N to N68E-21-N.

 

Compared with issue 02 (2009-10-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2009-10-30)

This is the second commercial release.

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following new

topics:

l 2 Physical Structure

l 6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board

l 6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board

l 6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 18/243

l 6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board

l 6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board

l 6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board

l6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board

l 6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board

l 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board

l 6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board

l 6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board

l 6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board

l 6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board

l 6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

l 6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

l 6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board

l 6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board

l 6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board

l 6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUa Board

l 6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board

l 6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIa Board

l 6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc Board

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the following

changes:

Topic Change Description

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board Added the description about the Automatic

Protection Switching (APS) function.

6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board Added the description about the APS

function.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board Added the description about the routing-

 based backup and load sharing functions.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board Added the description about the link aggregation function at the MAC layer.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc Board Added the description about the support for 

the Iur interface.

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc Board Added the description about the support for 

the Iur interface.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc Board Added the description about the support for 

the Iur interface.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board Added the description about the support for 

the Iur interface.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 19/243

Topic Change Description

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board Added the description about the APS function

and the description about the support for the

Iur interface.

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board Optimized the description about the functions

of the MPU and CPUS subsystems.

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board Optimized the description about the functions

of the MPU and CPUS subsystems.

 

Compared with issue 01 (2009-07-30) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2009-07-30)This is the first commercial release.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 UMTS Hardware Description

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 20/243

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, GPS antenna system, and LMT.

Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

 

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 21/243

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900

Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,

and surge protector.

The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It

is optional.

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal

that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal

software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The

LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.

For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS LMT User Guide.

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 22/243

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei

 N68E-22 cabinet or the Huawei N68E-21-N cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet

The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door 

cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.

3.2 Classification of Cabinets

Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended

 processing rack (EPR).

3.3 Components of the Cabinet

The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence

subrack, inde pendent fan subrack (configur ed in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,

rack, and rear cable trough.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available

space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC).

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet

This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in

the cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 23/243

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet

The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door 

cabinet. The N68E-21-N cabinet is a double-door cabinet.

Figure 3-1 shows the single-door N68E-22 cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door N68E-22

cabinet.

Figure 3-3 shows the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door N68E-22 cabinet

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 24/243

Figure 3-2 Double-door N68E-22 cabinet

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 25/243

Figure 3-3 N68E-21-N cabinet

 

3.2 Classification of Cabinets

Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR) and the extended

 processing rack (EPR).

MPR

Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR

The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be

configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

For details on the components of the MPR or the EPR, see 3.3 Components of the Cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 26/243

3.3 Components of the Cabinet

The components of the BSC6900 cabinet are the power distribution box, subrack, air defence

subrack, independent fan subrack (configured in only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet), cable rack,

rack, and rear cable trough.

Figure 3-4 shows the components of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22 model).

Figure 3-4 Components of the cabinet (N68E-22 model)

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack  

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 27/243

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

Table 3-1 Configuration of the cabinet

Component Configuration

Power Distribution Box Only one power distribution box is

configured.

Subrack  l The MPR is configured with one

main processing subrack (MPS) and

depending on the traffic volume zero

to two extended processing subracks

(EPSs).

l The EPR is configured with one to

three EPSs, depending on the traffic

volume.

Air Defence Subrack  Two air defence subracks are

configured.

Independent Fan Subrack  Only one independent fan subrack is

configured in the N68E-22 cabinet and

no independent fan subrack is

configured in the N68E-21-N cabinet.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

 

NOTE

l The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

l The components of the N68E-21-N cabinet is the same as those of the N68E-22 cabinet, except that the

 N68E-21-N cabinet is not configured with the independent fan subrack.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet

The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available

space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and Electromagnetic

Compatibility (EMC).

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)

The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet or N68E-21-N cabinet. The two models of 

cabinets have different technical specifications.

Table 3-2 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-2 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 28/243

Item Specification

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet≤ 100 kg

l Cabinet in full configuration≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386

l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/

EEC

Power consumption The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of power 

consumption of all subracks in the cabinet.

It is recommended that the power distribution system provide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet to

facilitate capacity expansion.

Heat dissipation l MPR ≤ 4100 W

l EPR ≤ 4100 W

 

CAUTION

When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,

multiple boards may become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if 

multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-21-N)

Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N).

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-21-N)

Item Specification

Dimensions 2,130 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)

Height of the available space 44 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet≤ 155 kg

l Cabinet in full configuration≤ 380 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 29/243

Item Specification

EMC l Meets the requirements in GR 1089

l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386

l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/EEC

 

NOTE

An empty cabinet refers to the one that is installed with front and back doors, side panels, a power 

distribution box, and a set of cables.

CAUTION

When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,

multiple boar ds may become abnormal at the same time. Therefore, check the power system if 

multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet

This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in

the cabinet.

NOTE

The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 or N68E-21-N cabinet. Only the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet requires

the independent fan subrack. The MPR and EPR mentioned in this section are of the N68E-22 model.

3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components

This section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of power 

distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the components

of the cabinet.

For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.

Figure 3-5 shows the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR. Table3-4 describes the working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 30/243

Figure 3-5 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR 

 

Table 3-4 Working mechanism of the power distribution box in the MPR 

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

63 A -48 V DC

output 1

A1(-) A7 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on the

independent fan subrack 

A8 NEG(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2

63 A -48 V DC

output 2

B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on the

independent fan subrack 

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

63 A RTN power 

output 1

A1(+) A7 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on the

independent fan subrack 

A8 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 

2

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 31/243

PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box

Outputof PowerDistribution Box

Subrack Input

63 A RTN power 

output 2

B1(+) B7 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on the

independent fan subrack 

B8 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 

2

100 A -48 V DC

output 1

A3(-) A9 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

A10 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

100 A -48 V DC

output 2

B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

B10 NEG

(-)

-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

100 A RTN power 

output 1

A3(+) A9 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 

1

A10 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 2 on subrack 

0

100 A RTN power 

output 2

B3(+) B9 RTN

(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 

1

B10 RTN(+)

RTN power input 1 on subrack 0

 

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet

The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack 

and independent fan subrack, thus ensuring stable power supply to the subrack and independent

fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in the

equipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Figure 3-6 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900

(N68E-22 cabinet).

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 32/243

Figure 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-22 cabinet

 

Table 3-5 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900

cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 33/243

Table 3-5 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet

SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack  

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack  

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack  

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and

the mounting bar 

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting

 bar 

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack  

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and

the mounting bar 

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

 

Figure 3-7 shows the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the Figure 3-7

(N68E-21-N cabinet).

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 34/243

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the N68E-21-N cabinet

 

Table 3-6 describes the connections of the power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900

cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 35/243

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet

SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack  

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack  

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack  

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and

the mounting bar 

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting

 bar 

20, 21 PGND cables for the cabinet busbar  

24, 25, 26 PGND cables connecting the busbars of different

cabinets

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

 

3.5.3 Distribution of Signal Cables for the MPR

The signal cables for the MPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, clock signal

cables, and monitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of Signal Cables for the MPRFigure 3-8 shows the connections of the signal cables for the MPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-8 are only taken as examples. The

actual configurations depend on the site planning.

l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are

taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 36/243

Figure 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the MPR 

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 37/243

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR

Table 3-7 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

Table 3-7 Connections of signal cables for the MPR SN Cable Name Connector

Type1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

1 Monitoring

signal cable for 

the power 

distribution box

DB15/Port

connecting the

 power 

distribution box

to the

independent fan

subrack 

DB9/

MONITOR 1

 port on the

independent fan

subrack 

The cable is

mandatory and is

installed before

delivery. Only one

monitoring signal

cable for the power 

distribution box isconfigured.

2, 3 GPS signal

transmission

cable connecting

GPS surge

 protector to

GCGa board

SMA/ANT port

on the GCGa

 board

Type N

connector/

Protect port of 

the GPS surge

 protector on top

of the cabinet

The cable is optional.

When installed, two

cables are required.

4 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port onthe SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port onthe SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

EPS

l Straight-through

cable

l Installed beforedelivery

5 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

EPS

6 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T2 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

EPS

7 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T3 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

EPS

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 38/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

8 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

EPS

9 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the

EPS

10 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T2 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T0 port on

the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the

EPS

11 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of 

differentsubracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T3 port on

the SCUa boardin slot 7 of the

MPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BA

SE-T1 port on

the SCUa boardin slot 6 of the

EPS

12, 13 BITS clock signal

cable

SMB or BNC/

BITS clock 

source

SMB connector 

(already

installed on the

BITS clock 

signal cable)/

CLKIN0 port on

the GCUa/

GCGa board

The cable is optional.

When installed, two

cables are required.

14, 15 Line clock signal

cable

SMB/2M0 or 

2M1 port on the

AOUa/POUa/

UOIa/AEUa

 board

SMB/CLKIN0

or CLKIN1 port

on the GCUa/

GCGa board

Two to four,

optional, installed

when the EPS is

responsible for 

receiving the line

clock signals

16 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT0 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 6 of the EPS

Optional. The

number of cables to

 be installed and their 

actual installation

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 39/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

17 positions depend on

the site planning.

Y-shaped clock 

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT1 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 7 of the EPS

18 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT2 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 6 of the EPS

19 Y-shaped clock  signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT3 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port on the

SCUa board in

slot 7 of the EPS

20 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT4 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 6 of the EPS

21 Y-shaped clock  signal cable RJ45/CLKOUT5 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port on the

SCUa board in

slot 7 of the EPS

22 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT6 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 6 of the EPS

23 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT7 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 7 of the EPS

24 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT8 ports

on the GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 6 of the EPS

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 40/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

25 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/

CLKOUT9 ports

on GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots

12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN

 port on the

SCUa board in

slot 7 of the EPS

26 Trunk cable

connecting AEUa

 board to other 

devices

DB44/Electrical

 port on the

AEUa board

Another device Optional. The

electrical port on the

AEUa board is taken

as an example. The

number of cables to

 be installed and their 

actual installation

 positions depend on

the site planning.

The information here

is an example based

on overhead cabling.

27 Y-shaped trunk  

cable connectingAEUa board to

other devices

Y-shaped DB44/

Electrical portson active and

standby AEUa

 boards

Another device

28 Optical cable

connecting

GOUa/AOUa/

POUa/UOIa/

GOUc/AOUc/

POUc/UOIc

 board to other 

devices

LC/PC/Optical

 port on the

GOUa/AOUa/

POUa/UOIa/

GOUc/AOUc/

POUc/UOIc

 board

Another device Optional. The

number of optical

cables to be installed

and their actual

installation positions

depend on the site

 planning. The

information here is

an example based on

overhead cabling.

29-32 Ethernet cable for  

the OMUa board

RJ45/Ethernet

 port on the

OMUa board

Another device l The cable is

mandatory. Two

to four cables are

required.

l Straight-through

cable. The

information here

is an example

 based on

overhead

cabling.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 41/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

33 Ethernet cable

connecting FG2a/

FG2c board to

other devices

RJ45/Ethernet

 port on the

FG2a/FG2c

 board

Another device l Optional. The

number of 

Ethernet cables to

 be installed and

their actual

installation

 positions depend

on the site

 planning.

l Straight-through

cable. The

Ethernet cablecan be connected

to any Ethernet

 port on the FG2a/

FG2c board. The

connection here

is only taken as

an example.

34 Monitoring

signal cable for 

the independent

fan subrack 

DB15/

MONITOR 0

 port on the

independent fansubrack 

DB9/Monitor 

 port on the rear 

of the bottom

subrack 

The cable is

mandatory and is

installed before

delivery. Only onemonitoring signal

cable for the

independent fan

subrack is

configured.

 

3.5.4 Distribution of Signal Cables for the EPR

The signal cables for the EPR refer to Ethernet cables, optical cables, trunk cables, andmonitoring signal cables for the power distribution box.

Connections of signal cables for the EPR

Figure 3-9 shows the connections of the signal cables for the EPR.

NOTE

l The types and number of the interface boards shown in Figure 3-9 are only taken as examples. The

actual configurations depend on the site planning.

l The installation positions and number of the Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables are

taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 42/243

Figure 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the EPR 

 

Description About the Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR

Table 3-8 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 43/243

Table 3-8 Connections of signal cables for the EPR 

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ Connection

Position1

ConnectorType2/ Connection

Position2

Remarks

1 Monitoring signal

cable for the power 

distribution box

DB15/Port

connecting the

 power distribution

 box to the

independent fan

subrack 

DB9/MONITOR 

1 port on the

independent fan

subrack 

The cable is

mandatory and

is installed

 before delivery.

Only one

monitoring

signal cable for 

the power 

distribution box

is configured.

2 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

l Straight-

through

cable

l Installed

 before

delivery3 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

4 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

5 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

6 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T8 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

7 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T9 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 44/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

8 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T6 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

9 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T7 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

10 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T9 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

11 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T8 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

12 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T0 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the EPS

RJ45/The10/100/1000BAS

E-T7 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the MPS

13 Ethernet cable

connecting SCUa

 boards of different

subracks

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T1 port on the

SCUa board in slot

6 of the EPS

RJ45/The

10/100/1000BAS

E-T6 port on the

SCUa board in slot

7 of the MPS

14 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT4

 ports on the

GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots 12

and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the EPS

Optional. The

number of 

cables to be

installed and

their actual

installation

 positions

depend on the

site planning.

15 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT5

 ports on the

GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots 12

and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the EPS

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 45/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

16 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT6

 ports on the

GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots 12

and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the EPS

17 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT7

 ports on the

GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots 12

and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the EPS

18 Y-shaped clock  signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT8 ports on the

GCUa/GCGa

 boards in slots 12

and 13

RJ45/CLKIN porton the SCUa board

in slot 6 of the EPS

19 Y-shaped clock  

signal cable

RJ45/CLKOUT9

 ports on GCUa/

GCGa boards in

slots 12 and 13

RJ45/CLKIN port

on the SCUa board

in slot 7 of the EPS

20 Trunk cable

connecting theAEUa board to

other devices

DB44/Electrical

 port on the AEUa board

Another device Optional. The

electrical porton the AEUa

 board is taken as

an example.

The number of 

cables to be

installed and

their actual

installation

 positions

depend on the

site planning.

Theinformation

here is an

example based

on overhead

cabling.

21 Y-shaped trunk  

cable connecting

the AEUa board to

other devices

Y-shaped DB44/

Electrical ports on

active and standby

AEUa boards

Another device

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 46/243

SN Cable Name ConnectorType1/ ConnectionPosition1

ConnectorType2/ ConnectionPosition2

Remarks

22, 23 Optical cable

connecting GOUa/

AOUa/POUa/

UOIa/GOUc/

AOUc/POUc/

UOIc board to

other devices

LC/PC/Optical

 port on the GOUa/

AOUa/POUa/

UOIa/GOUc/

AOUc/POUc/

UOIc board

Another device Optional. The

number of 

optical cables to

 be installed and

their actual

installation

 positions

depend on the

site planning.

The

information

here is anexample based

on overhead

cabling.

24, 25 Line clock signal

cable

SMB/2M0 or 2M1

 port on the AOUa/

POUa/UOIa/

GOUa/GOUc/

AOUc/POUc/

UOIc/AEUa board

SMB/CLKIN0 or 

CLKIN1 port on

the GCUa/GCGa

 board in slot 12 or 

13 of the MPS

The cable is

optional and is

installed only

when the cable

needs to be led

out from the

EPS in the EPR.

When installed,two to four 

cables are

required.

26 Monitoring signal

cable for the

independent fan

subrack 

DB15/MONITOR 

0 port on the

independent fan

subrack 

DB9/MONITOR 

 port on the rear of 

the bottom

subrack 

The cable is

mandatory and

is installed

 before delivery.

Only one

monitoring

signal cable for 

the independent

fan subrack is

configured.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 47/243

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box, air defence subrack, rear cable

trough, subrack, independent fan subrack, rack.

4.1 Power Distribution Box

A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.

4.2 Air Defence Subrack 

The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through

air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

4.3 Rear Cable Trough

The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable

trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack 

Besides the f an boxes configured in su bracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan

subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 48/243

4.1 Power Distribution Box

A power distribution box is installed inside each cabinet at the top.

The power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection for the four 

-48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet. Each group

has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The power distribution box also detects the status

of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and visual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the front panel of the power distribution box are the panel of the Power 

Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.

Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED

(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.12 PAMU Board.

l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,

indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the

RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the

 power distribution box.

 

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when

it is faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible

alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 49/243

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The PAMU board is functional and

communicates with the SCUa board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The PAMU board is not working or it

does not communicate with the SCUa

 board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMU

 board or the power distribution box

does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the power  

distribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.

During the self-check of the PAMU

 board, however, the ALM LED is also

ON. This indicates that the ALM LED

is functional.

 

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the Power Distribution Box

The components on the r ear panel of the power distribution box are the power input terminal

 block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack,

and a 2-hole grounding screw.

Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the power distribution box.

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal

 block 

(3) Port used to connect the power 

distribution box to a subrack 

(4) 2-hole grounding screw (5) J1 port (6) J2 port (port used to connect the power  

distribution box to a EMU)

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 50/243

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.

l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable

are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3

(+) and 1(+) respectively.

l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable

and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the Power Distribution Box

This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the

 power distribution box.

Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

Item Sub-item Specification

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A

consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group

B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each

group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power 

inputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output voltage

range

-40 V DC to -72 V DC

Output mode and

current

Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group

has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power 

outputs. The maximum rated output current of each

output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.

Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and

B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge

 protection function.

Output protection

specifications

The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need

to manually switch on the corresponding MCB

after the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.

Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)

NOTEFor group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds

to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs

B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 51/243

 

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Power Distribution Box

The power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a fixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components of the cabinet.

Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution box

and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight power 

switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR 

 

Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR 

Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

 

4.2 Air Defence Subrack

The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-throughair channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 52/243

Physical appearance

Figure 4-4 shows the air defence subrack.

Figure 4-4 Air defence subrack 

 

Dimensions

The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm

(depth).

4.3 Rear Cable Trough

The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable

trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.

Figure 4-5 shows the rear cable trough.

Figure 4-5 Rear cable trough

 

4.4 Independent Fan Subrack

Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan

subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 53/243

4.4.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack

The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affect

the appearance of the independent fan subrack.

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-6 Front view of the independent fan subrack 

(1) PFCB or PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack  

(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

 

NOTE

l The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.14

PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.15 PFCB Board.l When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the

fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For 

details, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).

l When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on the

fan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. For 

details, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board) .

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-7 Rear view of the independent fan subrack 

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power 

distribution box

(2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 54/243

(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.4.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack

The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight, power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility

(EMC).

Table 4-4 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Table 4-4 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack 

Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack:≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes:≤ 6.9

kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60

V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1

(2000-03).

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 55/243

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an

independent unit.

5.1 Classification of Subracks

Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended

 processing su brack (EPS).

5.2 Components of the Subrack 

The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

5.3 Fan Box

The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan

 box.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack 

The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front

and rear sides of the backplane.

5.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack 

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack 

BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typicalconfigurations of these subracks.

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack 

The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space

height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 56/243

5.1 Classification of Subracks

Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS) and extended

 processing subrack (EPS).

MPS

As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured

in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and

maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS

As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the

 basic services of the BSC6900.

5.2 Components of the Subrack

The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack

In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in

height. Figure 5-1 shows the structure of the subrack.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 57/243

Figure 5-1 Structure of the subrack 

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail

(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Grounding screw

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 58/243

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the

 power distribution box

(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch

 

Components

Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack 

Component Refer to...

Fan box 5.3 Fan Box

Slots in the subrack  5.4 Slots in the Subrack 

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cablesfrom the front of the subrack to both sides of the

cabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards in

the same subrack.

 

5.3 Fan Box

The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan

 box.

5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured

with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 59/243

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board

(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

 

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and

keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operations of the fans.

l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.14 PFCU

Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Color

Status Description

Gre

en

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (the fan box

is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (the fan box

is not registered).

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 60/243

Color

Status Description

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and has one of  

the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the subrack 

l Communication failure

l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too

low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered and has one

of the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the subrack 

l Fans ceasing to run or running at a too

low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

 

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the samesubrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the

SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)

The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,

detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from

55% to 100% of the full speed.

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 61/243

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans

in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)This section describes the appearance of and LEDs on the fan box when the fan box is configured

with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.

Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.

Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

(1) PFCB Board (2) Fans (3) LED on the fan box

(4) Screw (5) Handles of the fan box

 

NOTE

l The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.15 PFCB

Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.

Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 62/243

Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The fan box is supplied with power in

two ways without any fault (and isregistered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The fan box is supplied with power in

two ways without any fault (not

registered).

Red ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The fan box is registered and has one of 

the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the

subrack 

l Communication failure

l Fans ceasing to run or running at a

too low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

l Speed adjustment function failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The fan box is not registered and has one

of the following problems:

l One-way power supply to the

subrack l Fans ceasing to run or running at a

too low speed

l Fan box in an excessively high

temperature or temperature sensor 

failure

l Speed adjustment function failure

 

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the same

subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and the

SCUa board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,

maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 63/243

Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)

Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from

55% to 100% of the full speed.

 

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans

in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.4 Slots in the Subrack

The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front

and rear sides of the backplane.

Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack 

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 64/243

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered

from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.

l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair 

of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active andstandby slots.

5.5 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch

The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the

DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack .

Appearance

Figure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack 

 

Description about the DIP Switch

The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-6 describes the bits.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 65/243

Table 5-6 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the

least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant

 bit)

Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFF.

 

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd

number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Set bit 8 to OFF.

4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8

remains unchanged.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 5 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 5-7

describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 66/243

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF

 

5.6 Configuration of the Subrack

BSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS and EPS. This section describes the typical

configurations of these subracks.

5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS

The MPS is configured in the MPR. Each BSC6900 cabinet must be configured with one MPS.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUa board, SCUa board, SPUa/SPUb

 board, GCUa board, GCGa board, DPUb/DPUe board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/

UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Figure 5-6 shows the MPS in full configuration.

Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 67/243

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa

 board, POUa/POUc board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.

l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in

the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standbymode). For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and

how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.6.2 Configuration of the EPS

The EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. The BSC6900 cabinet can be configured with zero

to five EPSs.

The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUa board, SPUa/SPUb board, DPUb/DPUe

 board, AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUc board,

FG2a/FG2c board, and GOUa/GOUc board.

Figure 5-7 shows the EPS in full configuration.

Figure 5-7 EPS in full configuration

 

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the AEUa board, AOUa/AOUc board, UOIa/UOIc board, PEUa board, POUa/POUC board, FG2a/FG2c board, or GOUa/GOUc board.

l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in

the MPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby

mode). For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and

how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.

5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack

The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space

height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 68/243

Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack 

Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:≤

57 kg

Power consumption in full

configuration

l MPS:≤ 1,600 W

l EPS:≤ 1,450 W

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 69/243

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.

Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

NOTE

If a board is configured in independent mode, its slot can switch a maximum of 4096 timeslots. If boards are

configured in active/standby mode, their slots can switch a maximum of 7168 timeslots.

Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards

Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

AEUa ATM - 32-port ATM over  

E1/T1/J1 interface

Unit REV:a

AOUa ATM - 2-port ATM over  

channelized Optical

STM-1/OC-3

interface Unit

REV:a

AOUc ATM - 4-port ATM over  

channelized Optical

STM-1/OC-3

interface Unit

REV:c

DPUb UUP (UMTS RNC User  

 plane Process)

UMTS RNC user plane

 processing

Data Processing

Unit REV:b

DPUe UUP (UMTS RNC User  

 plane Process)

UMTS RNC user plane

 processing

Data Processing

Unit REV:e

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 70/243

Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

FG2a IP - 8-port FE or 2-port

electronic GE

interface unit REV:a

FG2c IP - 12-port FE or 4-port

electronic GE

interface unit REV:c

GCUa Clock - General Clock Unit

REV:a

GCGa Clock with GPS - General Clock Unit

with GPS REV:a

GOUa IP - 2-port packet over  

GE Optical interface

Unit REV:a

GOUc IP - 4-port packet over  

GE Optical interface

Unit REV:c

OMUa OAM (Operation,

Administration and

Maintenance)

OM management Operation and

Maintenance Unit

REV:a

PEUa IP - 32-port Packet over  

E1/T1/J1 interface

Unit REV:a

POUa IP - 2-port IP over  

channelized Optical

STM-1/OC-3

interface Unit

REV:a

POUc IP - 4-port IP over  

channelized Optical

STM-1/OC-3

interface Unit

REV:c

SCUa MAC Switching - GE Switching

network and Control

Unit REV:a

SPUa UCP (UMTS RNC Control

 plane Process)

UMTS RNC control plane

 processing

Signaling

Processing Unit

REV:aRUCP (Resource

Management and UMTS

RNC Control plane

Process)

Resource management

and UMTS RNC control

 plane processing

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 71/243

Board Logical Function Function Description Board Name

SPUb UCP (UMTS RNC Control

 plane Process)

UMTS RNC control plane

 processing

Signaling

Processing Unit

REV:bRUCP (ResourceManagement and UMTS

RNC Control plane

Process)

Resource managementand UMTS RNC control

 plane processing

UOIa ATM - 4-port ATM/Packet

over Unchannelized

Optical STM-1/

OC-3c Interface unit

REV:a

UOIc ATM - 8-port ATM/Packet

over UnchannelizedOptical STM-1/

OC-3c Interface unit

REV:c

PAMU - - Power Allocation

Monitoring Unit

PFCU - - Fan Control Unit

PFCB - - Fan Control Board

 

6.1 AEUa Board

AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.2 AOUa Board

AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The

AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of 

AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can

 be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed

in slots 14 to 27.

6.3 AOUc Board

AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

6.4 DPUb Board

DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to

ten DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS, two to twelve DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

6.5 DPUe Board

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 72/243

DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to

ten DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS, two to twelve DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

6.6 FG2a Board

FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board isoptional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots

14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.7 FG2c Board

FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 14 to 19.

For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.

6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board

GCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12

and 13 in the MPS.

6.9 GOUa Board

GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends

on site requir ements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots

24 to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.10 GOUc Board

GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots14 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.

6.11 OMUa Board

OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be

configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.

Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots

20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.

6.12 PAMU Board

PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power 

distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU

 board.

6.13 PEUa Board

PEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.14 PFCU Board

PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.15 PFCB Board

PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCB board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 73/243

6.16 POUa Board

POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The

POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

6.17 POUc Board

POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

6.18 SCUa Board

SCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.

Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS.

6.19 SPUa Board

SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to ten SPUa

 boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots

0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be

installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.

6.20 SPUb Board

SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to ten SPUb

 boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed

in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb boards can

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

6.21 UOIa BoardUOIa refers to 4-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit

REV:a. The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The

number of UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa

 board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be

installed in slots 14 to 27.

6.22 UOIc Board

UOIc refers to 8-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit

REV:c. The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number 

of UOIc boar ds to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIc board can

 be installed in slots 16 to 19. For the EPS, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 74/243

6.1 AEUa Board

AEUa refers to 32-port ATM over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The AEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the the EPS. The number of AEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AEUa boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.1.1 Functions of the AEUa Board

As an interface board, the AEUa board supports ATM over E1/T1/J1 transmission.

The AEUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 32 channels of ATM over E1s/T1s/J1s

l Provides 32 IMA groups or 32 UNI links

l Supports the Iub interfaces

l Provides the fractional ATM and the fractional IMA functions

l Supports the timeslot cross-connection function

l Receives clock signals from the Iu interface and transmits clock signals to the GCUa/GCGa

 board

6.1.2 Panel of the AEUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AEUa board.

Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the AEUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 75/243

Figure 6-1 Panel of the AEUa board

 

6.1.3 LEDs on the AEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the AEUa boardLED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 76/243

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.1.4 Ports on the AEUa Board

There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the AEUa board.

Table 6-3 describes the ports on the AEUa board.

Table 6-3 Ports on the AEUa board

Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/

T1 signals on channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/

T1 signals on channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/

T1 signals on channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/

T1 signals on channels 24-31

DB44

2M0 and 2M1 Ports for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male

connector 

 

6.1.5 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board

The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches

Figure 6-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 77/243

Figure 6-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 78/243

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-2, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-2 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-4 describes S2, S4, S6,

S8, and S10.

Table 6-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 24

to 31

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 16

to 23

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 0

to 7

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 79/243

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S8 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 8

to 15

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for  

setting the

working mode,

consisting of two

 bits

(ON, ON) Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the working

mode to E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the working

mode to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the working

mode to J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.1.6 Technical Specifications of the AEUa Board

The technical specifications of the AEUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-5 describes the hardware specifications of the AEUa board.

Table 6-5 Hardware specifications of the AEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 27.87 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 80/243

Item Specification

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-6 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-6 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 32

Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 680 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

45 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

45 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

90 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

6.2 AOUa Board

AOUa refers to 2-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The

AOUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of 

AOUa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUa board can

 be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUa board can be installed

in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AOUa boards can be installed in slots 20to 23 of the MPS.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 81/243

6.2.1 Functions of the AOUa Board

As an optical interface board, the AOUa board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3

transmission.

The AOUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on ATM

l Provides the AAL2 switching function

l Provides the IMA and the UNI functions

l Supports the Iub interfaces

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.2.2 Panel of the AOUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUa board.

Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the AOUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 82/243

Figure 6-3 Panel of the AOUa board

 

6.2.3 LEDs on the AOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-7 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 6-7 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 83/243

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.2.4 Ports on the AOUa Board

There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-8 describes the ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-8 Ports on the AOUa board

PortLocation

Port Function Connector Type

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1PortNumber

The first port

under LEDs

RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmitting

optical port

The second

 port under 

LEDs

RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167

TX Transmitting

optical port

Right abovethe sign

"PARC"

2M0 and2M1

Port for 2 MHzclock signal

outputs

SMB maleconnector 

- -

 

6.2.5 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board

The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches

are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 84/243

Layout of the DIP Switches

Figure 6-4 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Figure 6-4 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

CAUTION

All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is

faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP Switches

Table 6-9 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 85/243

Table 6-9 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode to JTAGconfiguration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode to CPU slave parallel

configuration

3 ON Setting working mode to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Setting the information structure to TU11

OFF Setting the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

 

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

6.2.6 Technical Specifications of the AOUa Board

The technical specifications of the AOUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-10 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUa board.

Table 6-10 Hardware specifications of the AOUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane

of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 

consumption

37.30 W

Weight 1.30 kg

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 86/243

Item Specification

Operating

temperature

(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating

temperature

(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative

humidity (long-

term)

5% to 85%

Relative

humidity (short-

term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-11 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-11 Specifications for the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 126

Speech service in the CS

domain

9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

195 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

195 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput(UL+DL)

390 Mbit/s

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 87/243

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-12 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board.

Table 6-12 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

optical

transmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

Maximum

output optical power 

-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm

Minimum

output optical

 power 

-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

 

6.3 AOUc Board

AOUc refers to 4-port ATM over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

AOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of AOUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the AOUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the AOUc board can be installed inslots 14 to 27.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 88/243

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the AOUc boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the AOUc BoardAs an optical interface board, the AOUc board supports ATM over channelized STM-1/OC-3

transmission.

The AOUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over the channelized STM-1/OC-3 optical ports

l Supports the IMA function

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.3.2 Panel of the AOUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the AOUc board.

Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the AOUc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 89/243

Figure 6-5 Panel of the AOUc board

 

6.3.3 LEDs on the AOUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-13 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 6-13 LEDs on the AOUc board

LED Color

Status Description

RUN Gree

n

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 90/243

LED Color

Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree

n

ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree

n

ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

6.3.4 Ports on the AOUc Board

There are four optical ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-14 describes the ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-14 Ports on the AOUc board

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1 PortNumber

0 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmittingoptical port

1 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167

TX Transmitting

optical port

2 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251

TX Transmitting

optical port

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 91/243

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1 PortNumber

3 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335

TX Transmitting

optical port

 

6.3.5 Technical Specifications of the AOUc Board

The technical specifications of the AOUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

Table 6-15 describes the hardware specifications of the AOUc board.

Table 6-15 Hardware specifications of the AOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane

of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power 

consumption

75.19 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating

temperature

(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating

temperature

(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative

humidity (long-

term)

5% to 85%

Relative

humidity (short-

term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-16 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 92/243

Table 6-16 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 79,000

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS

domain

18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

600 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS

domain

18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput(DL)

300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

600 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS

domain

18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 5,500 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

350 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

350 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

700 Mbit/s

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 93/243

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board.

Table 6-17 Specifications of the optical ports on the AOUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

optical

transmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

Maximumoutput optical

 power 

-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm

Minimum

output optical

 power 

-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

 

6.4 DPUb Board

DPUb refers to Data Processing Unit REV:b. The DPUb board is optional. For the MPS, two to

ten DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS, two to twelve DPUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 94/243

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the DPUb boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUb BoardThe DPUb board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.

The DPUb board performs the following functions:

l Multiplexes and demultiplexes

l Processes frame protocols

l Selects and distributes data

l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols

l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging

l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUb

 board

l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and

the MAC layer 

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUb Board

There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUb board.

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the DPUb board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 95/243

Figure 6-6 Panel of the DPUb board

 

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUb Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

Table 6-18 LEDs on the DPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 96/243

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is

abnormal.

 

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUb Board

The technical specifications of the DPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-19 describes the technical specifications of the DPUb board.

Table 6-19 Technical specifications of the DPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 60 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 97/243

Item Specification

Processing capability l Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 115

Mbit/s based on the conditions of UL 64

kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s

l Supporting 1,800 Erlang for CS speech

service

l Supporting 900 Erlang for CS data service

l Supporting 150 cells

l Supporting a maximum of 3300 active

subscribers (DCH/HSDPA/FACH)

 

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

6.5 DPUe Board

DPUe refers to Data Processing Unit REV:e. The DPUe board is optional. For the MPS, two to

ten DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27.

For the EPS, two to twelve DPUe boards can be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots 20to 23 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUe Board

The DPUe board processes and distributes the UMTS user-plane service data.

The DPUe board performs the following functions:

l Multiplexes and demultiplexes

l Processes frame protocols

l Selects and distributes data

l Performs the functions of the GTP-U, IUUP, PDCP, RLC, MAC, and FP protocols

l Performs encryption, decryption, and paging

l Processes internal communication protocols between the SPUa/SPUb board and the DPUe

 board

l Processes the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service (MBMS) at the RLC layer and

the MAC layer 

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUe Board

There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUe board.

Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the DPUe board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 98/243

Figure 6-7 Panel of the DPUe board

 

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUe Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Table 6-20 LEDs on the DPUe board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 99/243

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is

abnormal.

 

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUe Board

The technical specifications of the DPUe board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-21 describes the technical specifications of the DPUe board.

Table 6-21 Technical specifications of the DPUe board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 62.32 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 100/243

Item Specification

Processing capability l Supporting the UL+DL data stream at 335

Mbit/s based on the conditions of UL 64

kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s;Supporting the UL

+DL data stream at 800 Mbit/s based on the

conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/

s if the capacity license is configured

l Supporting 3,350 Erlang for CS speech

service

l Supporting 1,675 Erlang for CS data service

l Supporting 300 cells

l Supporting a maximum of 5880 active

subscribers (DCH/HSDPA/FACH)

 

6.6 FG2a Board

FG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board is

optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots

14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board

As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.

The FG2a board performs the following functions:

l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer 

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.

Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 101/243

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

 

6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 102/243

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board

There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock 

signal output ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2a board

Port Function ConnectorType

FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit

10/100M signals

RJ45

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to

transmit 10/100/1000M signals

RJ45

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male

connector 

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 103/243

6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board

The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.

Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

840 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 104/243

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

840 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL+DL)

840 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

6.7 FG2c Board

FG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 14 to 19.

For the EPS, the FG2c board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the FG2c boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board

As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The FG2c board performs the following functions:

l Provides 12 channels over FE ports or four channels over GE ports

l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer 

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 105/243

l Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized

clock signals

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

CAUTION

The FG2c board has the following restrictions:

l The FG2c board does not work in 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half-duplex mode

l If GE ports are used, the ports must be set to the automatic negotiation mode on both the

local end and the peer end.

l If FE ports are used, the ports must be set to the same negotiation mode on both the local end

and the peer end.

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.

Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 106/243

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

 

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 107/243

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board

There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2c board

Port Function Connector

Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M

signals

RJ45

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to

transmit 100/1000M signals

RJ45

 

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board

The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 108/243

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/

standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is

responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 79,000

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

2,600 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 109/243

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

2,600 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

3,200 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

6.8 GCUa/GCGa BoardGCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.

The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12

and 13 in the MPS.

6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:

l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the

synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals

and the reference clock for the entire system

l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock 

l Generates RFN signals for the system

l Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock 

 phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase

in the case of active/standby switchover.

l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS

card. (Only the GCGa board supports this function.)

6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 110/243

Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-10 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

 

6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 111/243

Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board

There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board

Port Function Connector Type

ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa

 board is used to receive the timing signals and

 positioning information from the GPS satellite. This

 port is not used on the GCUa board.

SMA male

connector 

CLKOUT0 to

CLKOUT9

Ports for providing synchronization clock signals.

The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals

and 1PPS clock signals.

RJ45

COM0 Reserved.This interface receives only clock signals

and discards other signals.

RJ45

COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are

used for testing.

SMB male

connector 

TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB male

connector 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 112/243

Port Function Connector Type

CLKIN0 and

CLKIN1

Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock 

signals

SMB male

connector 

 

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board

The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,

 power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

 

6.9 GOUa Board

GOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed depends

on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots

24 to 27. For the EPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.

The GOUa board performs the following functions:

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 113/243

l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUa board

 

6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are thr ee LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 114/243

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board

There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical

signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,

and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

2M0 and

2M1

Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector  

 

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board

The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 115/243

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane

of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature

(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

840 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 116/243

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

840 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 840 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

840 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum optical

transmissiondistance

0.5 km 10 km

Maximum output

optical power 

-2.5 dBm -3.0 dBm

Minimum output

optical power 

-9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm

Minimum receiver 

sensitivity

-17.0 dBm -20.0 dBm

Overload receive

optical power 

0.0 dBm -3.0 dBm

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 117/243

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

 

6.10 GOUc Board

GOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board is

optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to be

installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots

14 to 19. For the EPS, the GOUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the GOUc boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board

As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.

The GOUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over GE ports

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

NOTE

The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.

6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 118/243

Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUc board

 

6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 119/243

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (optical

 port LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical

 port LED)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board

There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical

signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,

and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

LC/PC

TX

 

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board

The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 120/243

Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The

 backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-

term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 79,000

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

2,600 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,300 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 121/243

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,300 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

2,600 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 1,600 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

3,200 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.

Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25G-1310 nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Transmission

distance

10 km 0.5 km

Maximum output

optical power 

-3 dBm -3 dBm

Minimum output

optical power 

-9.5 dBm -9 dBm

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 122/243

Item Specification

Optical Module 1.25G-1310 nm-10 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP

Minimum receiver 

sensitivity

-23 dBm -20 dBm

 

6.11 OMUa Board

OMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. One or two OMUa boards must be

configured in the BSC6900. The width of the OMUa board is twice the width of other boards.

Therefore, one OMUa board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots

20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.

NOTE

This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa boards are installed in slots

20 to 23.

6.11.1 Functions of the OMUa Board

The OMUa board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance

Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The OMUa board performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system

l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the

BSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa

 board of the BSC6900

6.11.2 Panel of the OMUa Board

There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa board. In addition, there are hard

disks installed on the OMUa board.

Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the OMUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 123/243

Figure 6-13 Panel of the OMUa board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED

(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button

(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED

(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for fixing the hard disk 

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 124/243

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers

away from the front panel of the OMUa board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power 

switch.

lThe SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.

l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.

l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing the

RESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operating

the two buttons whenever possible.

6.11.3 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.

Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 6-43 LEDs on the OMUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the

 board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is being switched over to

the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation

on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or  

written.

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 125/243

6.11.4 Ports on the OMUa Board

There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one

VGA port on the OMUa board.

Table 6-44 describes the ports on the OMUa board.

Table 6-44 Ports on the OMUa board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used to

connect USB devices.An operating

system is installed on the server 

 board, with a user name and

 password. Therefore, to use the

USB interface, you must log in to

the operating system first.

Type-A

ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC Serial port. This port is used for 

system commissioning or for 

common serial port usage.This

serial port receives only debugging

data and discards other data.

DB9

VGA Port for the video -

 

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa Board

This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the

OMUa board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard disk capacity,

memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes

Table 6-45 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa board.

Table 6-45 Hardware configuration indexes

Counter Name Index of the OMUa Board

Size 248 mm x 64.6mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two routes of -48 V DC in redundancy backup mode

(provided by the backplane of the subrack)

 Number of logical CPUs 4

Power consumption 120 W

Weight 4.0 kg

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 126/243

Counter Name Index of the OMUa Board

Hard disk capacity 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)

Memory capacity 2 GB

Temperature required when

working for a long time

5°C to 40°C

Temperature required when

working for a short time

0°C to 50°C

Relative humidity required

when working for a long time

5%-85%

Relative humidity required

when working for a short time

5%-95%

 

Performance Counters

Table 6-46 describes the performance counters of the OMUa board.

Table 6-46 Performance counters of the OMUa board

Performance Counter Performance Counters of the OMUa Board

 Number of recorded

alarms

The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.

Time when the standby

OMU data is

synchronized with the

active OMU data

The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active

OMU board every second.

Duration of the

synchronization between

the active OMU files and

standby OMU files

Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies

according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.

Duration of the

switchover between theactive and standby OMUs

Time between an OMU switchover request is received and the

switchover is complete. A switchover is complete within four minutes.

Duration of the OMU

restart

Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This duration

lasts for about three minutes.

 

The OMUa board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as high

temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To ensure the lifespan of the OMUa board, the OMUa board must be protected against vibration,

shock, and abnormal shutdown.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 127/243

6.12 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power 

distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU

 board.

6.12.1 Functions of the PAMU Board

The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900

cabinet.

The PAMU board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms

l Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms

l Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and

communicates with the SCUa board

l Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.12.2 Panel of the PAMU Board

On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.

Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Figure 6-14 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 128/243

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is

faulty.

l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when

it is faulty.

6.12.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-47 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 6-47 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The PAMU board is functional and

communicates with the SCUa board

 properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF

for 0.25s

The PAMU board is faulty or it does not

communicate with the SCUa board

 properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board

is abnormal or the power distribution

 box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.

During the self-check of the PAMU

 board, however, the ALM LED is also

ON. This indicates that the ALM LED

is functional.

 

6.12.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board

The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-15 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-15 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 129/243

 

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table

6-48.

Table 6-48 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-48.

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board

The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, and weight.

Table 6-49 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-49 Technical specifications of the PAMU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

 

6.13 PEUa BoardPEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.

It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installed

depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 19

and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots 20to 23 of the MPS.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 130/243

6.13.1 Functions of the PEUa Board

As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.

The PEUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1

l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP

links

l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa

 boards

l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission

rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.

l Supports the Iub interfaces

6.13.2 Panel of the PEUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-16 Panel of the PEUa board

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 131/243

6.13.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 6-50 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.13.4 Ports on the PEUa Board

There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-51 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-51 Ports on the PEUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 0-7

DB44

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 8-15

DB44

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 16-23

DB44

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1

signals on channels 24-31

DB44

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 132/243

Port Function ConnectorType

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male

connector 

 

6.13.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 6-17 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 133/243

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-17, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-17 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-52 describes the DIP

switches on the PEUa board.

Table 6-52 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 134/243

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,

consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the

working mode to

E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

6.13.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa BoardThe technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative

humidity.

Table 6-53 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-53 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 135/243

Item Specification

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-54 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-54 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol)

 ports

23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 32

Speech service in the CS domain 2,800 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 850 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

60 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

60 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

120 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 136/243

6.14 PFCU Board

PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.14.1 Functions of the PFCU Board

The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.

The PFCU board performs the following functions:

l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the

LED

l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box

l Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors

l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan

speed

l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.14.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 6-18 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-18 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 6-55. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 1.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 137/243

Table 6-55 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant bit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)Figure 6-19 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-19 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 6-56. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant bit) ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 138/243

6.14.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed

adjustment.

Table 6-57 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-57 Technical specifications of the PFCU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%

to 100% of the full speed.

 

6.15 PFCB Board

PFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each

fan box is configured with one PFCB board.

6.15.1 Functions of the PFCB Board

The PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.

The PFCB board performs the following functions:

l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the

LED

l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box, and

responds to the fan speed adjustment commandl Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts the

fan speed based on the temperature information

l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan

speed

l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.15.2 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 139/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 140/243

 

NOTE

The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.15.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board

The technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,

frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, and

requirement for fan speed adjustment.

Table 6-60 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.

Table 6-60 Technical specifications of the PFCB board

Item SpecificationDimensions 390 mm × 50 mm

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%

to 100% of the full speed.

 

6.16 POUa Board

POUa refers to 2-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:a. The

POUa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of POUa

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUa board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUa board can be installed in

slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the POUa boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.16.1 Functions of the POUa Board

As an interface board, the POUa board supports channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission based

on IP protocol.

The POUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol

l Supports IP over E1/T1 over SDH/SONET

l Provides MLPPP groups.

l Supports 126 E1s or 168 T1s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 141/243

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby POUa boards

l Supports the Iub interfaces

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.16.2 Panel of the POUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUa board.

Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the POUa board.

Figure 6-22 Panel of the POUa board

 

6.16.3 LEDs on the POUa Board

There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 142/243

Table 6-61 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 6-61 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

6.16.4 Ports on the POUa Board

There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-62 describes the ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-62 Ports on the POUa board

PortLocation

Port Function Connector Type

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1PortNumber

The first port

under LEDs

RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmitting

optical port

The second

 port under 

LEDs

RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167

TX Transmitting

optical port

Right above

the sign

"PARC"

2M0 and

2M1

Port for 2 MHz

clock signal

outputs

SMB male

connector 

- -

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 143/243

 

6.16.5 DIP Switches on the POUa Board

The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches

are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches

Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

CAUTION

All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel

is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 144/243

Description of the DIP Switches

Table 6-63 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 6-63 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning  

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode

to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode

to CPU slave parallel

configuration

3 ON Setting working mode

to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode

to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped

 path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped

 path to AU4

5 ON Setting the

information structure

to TU11

OFF Setting the

information structure

to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

 

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

6.16.6 Technical Specifications of the POUa Board

The technical specifications of the POUa board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-64 describes the hardware specifications of the POUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 145/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 146/243

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-66 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board.

Table 6-66 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUa board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155

M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

optical

transmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

Maximum

output optical power 

-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm

Minimum

output optical

 power 

-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

 

6.17 POUc Board

POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. The

POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUc

 boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can be

installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed inslots 14 to 27.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 147/243

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.17.1 Functions of the POUc BoardAs an interface board, the POUc board supports IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3 transmission.

The POUc board performs the following functions:

l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on IP protocol

l Supports the PPP function

l Extracts line clock signals

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby POUc boards

l Supports the Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.17.2 Panel of the POUc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.

Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the POUc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 148/243

Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board

 

6.17.3 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-67 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-67 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 149/243

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

6.17.4 Ports on the POUc Board

There are four optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-68 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-68 Ports on the POUc board

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1 PortNumber

0 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmitting

optical port

1 RX Receivingoptical port

LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167

TX Transmitting

optical port

2 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251

TX Transmitting

optical port

3 RX Receiving

optical port

LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 150/243

PortNumber

Port Function ConnectorType

Multiplexing E1 PortNumber

Multiplexing T1 PortNumber

TX Transmitting

optical port

 

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board

The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-69 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the POUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

 

Table 6-70 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-70 S pecifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol)

 ports

79,000

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 252

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 151/243

Item Specification

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

400 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

400 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

800 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 6,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput

(UL)

400 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(DL)

400 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput

(UL+DL)

800 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-71 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-71 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

optical

transmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 152/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 153/243

Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board

 

6.18.3 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-72 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-72 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 154/243

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

6.18.4 Ports on the SCUa Board

There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, and

one TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.

Table 6-73 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Table 6-73 Ports on the SCUa board

Port Function ConnectorType

10/100/100

0BASE-T0

to

10/100/100

0BASE-T9

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter-

subrack connection.

RJ45

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 155/243

Port Function ConnectorType

10/100/100

0BASE-

T10 to

10/100/100

0BASE-

T11

10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unused

in the BSC6900.

RJ45

COM Serial port for commissioning.This serial port receives only

debugging data and discards other data.

RJ45

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8

kHz and the 1 PPS clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa

 board.

RJ45

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for testing.

SMB maleconnector 

 

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board

The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-74 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the SCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 156/243

6.19 SPUa Board

SPUa refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:a. The SPUa board is optional. Two to ten SPUa

 boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots

0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUa boards can be

installed in slots 0 to 5 and slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the SPUa boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.19.1 Functions of the SPUa Board

Loaded with different software, the SPUa board is functionally divided into main control SPUa

 board and non-main control SPUa board. The main control SPUa board is used to manage theUMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUa board is used

to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an SPUa board:

l If Logical function type is set to RUCP, the SPUa board serves as a main control SPUa board.

l If Logical function type is set to UCP, the SPUa board serves as a non-main control SPUa board.

Main Control SPUa Board

The main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to

manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the

system. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources

 between subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load

information on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-

RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane

resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control SPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which

is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 157/243

Non-Main Control SPUa Board

The non-main control SPUa board has four logical subsystems.

The four subsystems of the non-main control SPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used to

 process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

6.19.2 Panel of the SPUa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUa board.

Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the SPUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 158/243

Figure 6-26 Panel of the SPUa board

 

6.19.3 LEDs on the SPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 6-75 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 159/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 160/243

Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the SPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 76.60 W

Weight 1.60 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control

SPUa board

Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 67,500

BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main

control SPUa board

Supporting 100 NodeBs, 300 cells, and 90,000

Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)

 

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCAspecification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.

6.20 SPUb Board

SPUb refers to Signaling Processing Unit REV:b. The SPUb board is optional. Two to ten SPUb

 boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed

in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 19, and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the SPUb boards can

 be installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 13, and slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the SPUb boards can be installed in slots 20to 23 of the MPS.

6.20.1 Functions of the SPUb Board

Loaded with different software, the SPUb board is functionally divided into main control SPUb

 board and non-main control SPUb board. The main control SPUb board is used to manage the

UMTS user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system

and process the UMTS services on the control plane. The non-main control SPUb board is used

to process the UMTS services on the control plane.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 161/243

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an SPUb board:

l If Logical function type is set to RUCP, the SPUb board serves as a main control SPUb board.

l If Logical function type is set to UCP, the SPUb board serves as a non-main control SPUb board.

Main Control SPUb Board

The main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

Subsystem 0 of the main control SPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to

manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the

system. The functions are described as follows:

l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources

 between subracks

l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the loadinformation on the control planes between subracks

l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-

RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query

l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane

resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900

Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control SPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which

is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control SPUb Board

The non-main control SPUb board has eight logical subsystems.

The eight subsystems of the non-main control SPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used

to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:

l Processing upper-layer signaling over the Uu, Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

l Processing transport layer signaling

l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and

establishing signaling and service connections

l Processing RFN signaling

6.20.2 Panel of the SPUb Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SPUb board.

Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SPUb board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 162/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 163/243

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

6.20.4 Ports on the SPUb Board

There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-79 describes the ports on the SPUb board.

Table 6-79 Ports on the SPUb board

Port Function

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to

10/100/1000BASE-T3

Ethernet ports

 

6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the SPUb Board

The technical specifications of the SPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power 

consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-80 describes the technical specifications of the SPUb board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 164/243

Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the SPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.

The backplane of the subrack is responsible for 

the power supply.

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control

SPUb board

Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 114,000

BHCAs

Processing capability of the non-main

control SPUb board

Supporting 180 NodeBs, 600 cells, and 130,000

BHCAs

 

NOTE

The preceding BHCA specification is calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. The BHCA

specification configured for an SPU depends on the actual traffic model.

6.21 UOIa Board

UOIa refers to 4-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit

REV:a. The UOIa board is optional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The

number of UOIa boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIa

 board can be installed in slots 14 to 19 and slots 24 to 27. For the EPS, the UOIa board can be

installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the UOIa boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the UOIa Board

As an optical interface board, the UOIa board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c

transmission by loading different applications.

The UOIa board performs the following functions:

l Provides four unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical interfaces

l Supports ATM over SDH/SONET

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 165/243

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby UOIa boards

l Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

6.21.2 Panel of the UOIa Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIa board.

Figure 6-28 shows the panel of the UOIa board.

Figure 6-28 Panel of the UOIa board

 

6.21.3 LEDs on the UOIa Board

There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 166/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 167/243

Table 6-83 Hardware specifications of the UOIa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of 

the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 30.05 W

Weight 1.15 kg

Operating temperature

(long-term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature

(short-term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity(long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-84 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM

transmission mode.

Table 6-84 Specifications of the processing capability of the UOIa board in ATM transmissionmode

Item Specification

 Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 23,000

Session setup/release times 500/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 300

Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

450 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 3,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 225 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 225 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 168/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 169/243

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

 

6.22 UOIc Board

UOIc refers to 8-port ATM/Packet over Unchannelized Optical STM-1/OC-3c Interface unit

REV:c. The UOIc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number 

of UOIc boards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the UOIc board can

 be installed in slots 16 to 19. For the EPS, the UOIc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23.

NOTE

If the OMUa boards are not installed in slots 20 to 23 of the MPS, the UOIc boards can be installed in slots 20

to 23 of the MPS.

6.22.1 Functions of the UOIc BoardAs an optical interface board, the UOIc board supports ATM over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c

transmission.

The UOIc board performs the following functions:

l Provides eight channels over unchannelized STM-1/OC-3c optical ports

l Supports ATM over SDH/SONET

l Supports the extraction of line clock signals

l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and

standby UOIc boardsl Supports the Iu, Iur, and Iub interfaces

6.22.2 Panel of the UOIc Board

There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the UOIc board.

Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the UOIc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 170/243

Figure 6-29 Panel of the UOIc board

 

6.22.3 LEDs on the UOIc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-86 describes the LEDs on the UOIc board.

Table 6-86 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Color

Status Description

RUN Gree

n

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 171/243

LED Color

Status Description

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree

n

ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree

n

ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

6.22.4 Ports on the UOIc Board

There are eight optical ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-87 describes the ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-87 Ports on the UOIc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive

optical signals. TX refers to the transmitting

optical port, and RX refers to the receiving

optical port.

LC/PC

TX

 

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the UOIc BoardThe technical specifications of the UOIc board consist of hardware specifications and

specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications

consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,

and relative humidity.

Table 6-88 describes the hardware specifications of the UOIc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 172/243

Table 6-88 Hardware specifications of the UOIc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the

subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 86.52 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating

temperature (long-

term)

0°C to 45°C

Operating

temperature (short-

term)

-5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity

(long-term)

5% to 85%

Relative humidity

(short-term)

5% to 95%

 

Table 6-89 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-89 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

 Number of channel identifiers(CIDs) 79,000

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

Iub Number of NodeBs 500

Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

800 Mbit/s

Iur Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Maximum payload throughput (UL) 800 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 800 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 173/243

Item Specification

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

800 Mbit/s

Iu-CS Speech service in the CS domain 18,000 Erlang

Data service in the CS domain 9,000 Erlang

Iu-PS Maximum payload throughput (UL) 900 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (DL) 900 Mbit/s

Maximum payload throughput (UL

+DL)

1,800 Mbit/s

 

NOTE

l The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board

is configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

l The data service in the CS domain indicates the 64 kbit/s video phone service.

l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Iub/Iu/Iur-

interface board.

l The throughput specifications are based on the conditions of UL 64 kbit/s and DL 384 kbit/s.

Table 6-90 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board.

Table 6-90 Specifications of the optical ports on the UOIc board

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode

Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC

Maximum

opticaltransmission

distance

2 km 15 km 40 km

Maximum

output optical

 power 

-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm

Minimum

output optical

 power 

-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 174/243

Item Specification

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP

Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP

Minimum

receiver 

sensitivity

-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm

Center 

wavelength

1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Transmission

rate

155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 6 Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 175/243

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power Ca bles

The power ca bles are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and

internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

7.2 PGND Cables

The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for 

the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan

subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

7.3 Optical Cable

The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board to

the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed

depends on the site requirements.

7.4 Optical S plitter/Combiner 

The optical s plitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/

combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split

one input into two.

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable

The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial

cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby

AEUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk 

signals.

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of 

active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1

signals.

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 176/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 177/243

7.1 Power Cables

The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories, that is, external power cables and

internal power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

Description About Power Cables

The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution

 box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal

 power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal

 power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.

Table 7-1 describes the external power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-2 describes

the external power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Table 7-1 External power cables for the N68E-21-N cabinet

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Externa

l -48 V

 power 

cable

Blue 25/35 2-hole JG

terminal/-48 V DC

input port on the

 power distribution

 box

OT terminal/-48

V DC output

 port on the PDF

Four per 

cabinet

Externa

l RTN

 power 

cable

Black 25/35 2-hole JG

terminal/-48 V DC

input port on the

 power distribution

 box

OT terminal/-48

V DC output

 port on the PDF

Four per 

cabinet

 

Table 7-2 External power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Externa

l -48 V

 power 

cable

Blue 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V

DC input port on the

 power distribution

 box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the PDF

Four per 

cabinet

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 178/243

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Externa

l RTN

 power 

cable

Black 25/35 OT terminal/-48 V

DC input port on the

 power distribution

 box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the PDF

Four per 

cabinet

 

NOTE

The cables delivered to different countries and regions are different in color and appearance. If engineers

are to purchase the cables in the local area, ensure that the cables purchased meet the local specifications.

The connectors of the internal power cables for the N68E-22 cabinet are the same as those for 

the N68E-21-N cabinet. Table 7-3 describes the internal power cables.

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (1)

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal

-48 VDC

 power 

cable

Blue 10 OT terminal/-48 V

DC output port onthe power 

distribution box

OT

terminal/-48 VDC output port

on the subrack 

Two per 

subrack 

Internal

RTN

 power 

cable

Black 10 OT terminal/-48 V

DC output port on

the power 

distribution box

OT

terminal/-48 V

DC output port

on the subrack 

Two per 

subrack 

 

Table 7-4 Internal power cables (2)

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal

-48 V

DC

 power 

cable

Blue 2 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

D-type

connector/

 power input

 port on the

independent

fan subrack 

Two per subrack 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 179/243

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

ConnectorType 1/ InstallationPosition 1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

Internal

RTN

 power 

cable

Black 2 OT

terminal/-48 V

DC input port

on the power 

distribution

 box

D-type

connector/

 power input

 port on the

independent

fan subrack 

Two per subrack 

 

Appearance

Figure 7-1 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

Figure 7-1 Internal power cable for subracks

(1) OT terminal

 

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

Figure 7-3 shows the external power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet.

Figure 7-3 External power cable for the N68E-22 cabinet

(1) OT terminal

 

Figure 7-4 shows the external power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 180/243

Figure 7-4 External power cable for the N68E-21-N cabinet

(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal

 

7.2 PGND Cables

The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for 

the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan

subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.

Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are

combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent

cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.

Table 7-5 describes the PGND cables.

Table 7-5 PGND cables

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type1/ 

InstallationPosition1

ConnectorType 2/ Installation

Position 2

Quantity

External

PGND

cable

Green and

yellow

25/35 OT

terminal/

Groundin

g bolt at

the top

rear of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/

PGND output

 port on the PDF

One per 

cabinet

Inter-

cabinet

PGND

cable

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/

PGND busbar of 

each cabinet

Three

 between

every two

adjacent

cabinets

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 181/243

CableName

Color Cross-SectionalArea

mm2

Connector Type1/ Installati

onPosition1

ConnectorType 2/ InstallationPosition 2

Quantity

PGND

cable for 

the power 

distributio

n box

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/Port

for PGND cable

on the power 

distribution box

One per 

 power 

distribution

 box

PGND

cable for 

the subrack 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/Port

for the PGND

cable on the

subrack 

Two per 

subrack 

PGND

cable for 

the cabinet

door 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/

Groundin

g bolt on

the base

OT terminal/

Grounding bolt

on the cabinet

door 

Eight per 

cabinet

PGND

cable for the

independe

nt fan

subrack 

Green and

yellow

6 OT

terminal/PGND

 busbar of 

each

cabinet

OT terminal/

Grounding pointof the

independent fan

subrack 

One per 

independentfan subrack 

 

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for 

the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6

shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 182/243

7.3 Optical Cable

The optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board tothe Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installed

depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable

According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be

classified into the following types:

l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

l LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

l LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable

NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical

interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site

requirements.

l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the

ODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.

l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with

temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected

to the RX port.

CAUTION

The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical

signals cannot be received or transmitted.

BSC6900 Optical Cables

Table 7-6 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-6 BSC6900 optical cables

Optical Cable Type Appearance

LC/PC-LC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-FC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

LC/PC-SC/PC single-

mode/multi-mode

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 183/243

Installation

The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board

in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC

connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the

optical cable.

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner

The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/

combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split

one input into two.

FunctionThe optical splitter/combiner splits or combines optical signals.

Figure 7-8 shows the operating principle of an optical combiner.

Figure 7-8 Operating principle of an optical combiner 

Figure 7-9 shows the operating principle of an optical splitter.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 184/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 185/243

CAUTION

Only the AOUa, UOIa, AOUc, POUc, and UOIc boards can be connected to an optical splitter/

combiner.The optical splitter/combiner cannot be used to solve any of the following problems:

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. When the

transmission on the TX optical fiber for the active optical port is interrupted, the BSC6900

reports a Multiplex Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm on the active and

standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active

and standby optical ports.

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The

transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the

TX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a MS RDI alarm on the active and

standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active

and standby optical ports.

l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The

transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the

RX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm on

the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered

 between the active and standby optical ports.

Installation

Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of optical splitters/combiners.

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of optical splitters/combiners

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 186/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 187/243

Table 7-7 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables

Pin ofDB44Connec

tor

 W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connec

tor

 W2 Remarks

Signal Micro

Coaxial CableIdentifier

Signal Micro

Coaxial CableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

 

Table 7-8 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-7.

Table 7-8 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

 

Installation

One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 188/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 189/243

Table 7-9 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remarks

X1 W4 Remarks

Pin of

DB44Connector

Signal Micro

CoaxialCableIdentifier

Pin of

DB44Connector

Signal Micro

CoaxialCableIdentifier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T321 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

 

NOTE

In Table 7-9, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.

Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-10 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-9.

Table 7-10 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring Shielding layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 190/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 191/243

Figure 7-14 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

 

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm

twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the

active/standby AEUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

AppearanceFigure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-15 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of  

the cable)

(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector 

 

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add aconnector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 192/243

Pin Assignment

The outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the

metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-12 describes the pin assignment of the DB44

connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable

Pin ofDB44Connector

 W1 Color Pin ofDB44Connector

 W2 Color

Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

 

Table 7-13 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-12.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 193/243

Table 7-13 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1

signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1

signals

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1

signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/

T1 signals

 

Installation

One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the AEUa/

PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The

number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable

connects the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/

T1 signals.

Appearance

Figure 7-16 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-16 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector  

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer 

of the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 194/243

 

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You

need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Table 7-14 and Table 7-16 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-14 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier

Pin ofDB44Connector

Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

 

NOTE

In Table 7-14, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-15 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-14.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 195/243

Table 7-15 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

to the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1

signals to the BSC6900

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals

from the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1

signals from the BSC6900

 

Table 7-16 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2

Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

Pin of X1Connector

Pin of X2Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR  

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR  

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR  

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR  

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR  

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR  

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR  

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR  

16 16 7 7

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 196/243

NOTE

In Table 7-16, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layer 

of the twisted pair cable.

Installation

The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are

connected to the active and standby AEUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby

120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another 

 NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable can also be connected to another NE directly.

Figure 7-17 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-17 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

 

7.9 BITS Clock Cable

The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock 

cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals

to the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the

BITS clock signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion cables.

Appearance

Figure 7-18 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 197/243

Figure 7-18 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

 

Figure 7-19 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Figure 7-19 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

 

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is

used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the

connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation

One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the

GCUa/GCGa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.

Figure 7-20 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 198/243

Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

 

7.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable

The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cables. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped

clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz

clock signals from the GCUa/GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance

Figure 7-21 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 199/243

Figure 7-21 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector  

 

Installation

The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board in

the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active and

standby GCUa/GCGa boards in the MPS.

Figure 7-22 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 200/243

7.11 Line Clock Signal Cable

The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to

transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the

GCUa/GCGa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent

to the GCUa/GCGa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is

not required.

Appearance

Figure 7-23 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-23 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector 

 

InstallationOne end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface

 board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the

GCUa/GCGa board.

7.12 Straight-Through Cable

The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded

straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards

in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/

FG2c board to other devices. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends onthe site requirements.

Appearance

Figure 7-24 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 201/243

Figure 7-24 Shielded straight-through cable

 

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-25 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-25 Unshielded straight-through cable

 

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment

Table 7-17 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-

through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 202/243

Table 7-17 Pins of the straight-through cable

X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

 

Installation

l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different

subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards

that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-26.

Figure 7-26 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the

SCUa boards in different subracks

 

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa board to other 

devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on the

OMUa board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

Ethernet port on the other devices.

l

When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 203/243

FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

Ethernet port on the other devices.

7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent FanSubrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the

service subracks.

Appearance

Figure 7-27 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-27 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

 

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one endand a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-18 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-18 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair  

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair  

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is

connected to

X2.SHELL through

the shielding layer.

 

Table 7-19 describes the signals listed in Table 7-18.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 204/243

Table 7-19 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

 

Installation

The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack 

is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at

the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to

top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the

 bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable

The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You

can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the

alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance

The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type

must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal

cable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-28 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-28 Alarm box signal cable

 

Pin Assignment

Table 7-20 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 205/243

Table 7-20 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

 

Installation

The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port

on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the

serial port on the LMT.

Figure 7-29 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-29 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

 

7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power DistributionBox

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from

the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance

Figure 7-30 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Figure 7-30 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 206/243

 

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and

a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-21 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Table 7-21 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair  

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair  

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is

connected to

X2.SHELL through

the shielding layer.

 

Table 7-22 describes the signals listed in Table 7-21.

Table 7-22 Signals

Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

 

Installation

The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is

connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the

other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-31 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power 

distribution box.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 207/243

Figure 7-31 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

 

7.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable

The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to

the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Appearance

Figure 7-32 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.

Figure 7-32 GPS signal tr ansmission cable

 

X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector 

Installation

Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of 

a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmissioncable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 208/243

to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of 

the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.17 OMU serial port cableThe OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance

Figure 7-33 shows the OMU serial port cable.

Figure 7-33 OMU serial port cable

 

Pin Assignment

Both ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-23 lists the

 pins of the OMU serial port cable.

Table 7-23 Pins of the OMU serial port cable

DB9 DB9

2 3

3 2

5 5

 

Installation PositionOne end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The

other end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance

terminal.

NOTE

The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable

The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 andthe EMU.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 209/243

Appearance

Figure 7-34 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-34 RS485 communication cable

 

Pin AssignmentTable 7-24 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

Table 7-24 Pins of the RS485 communication cable

RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

 

Installation

The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9

female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end

of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal

cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is

recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not

sufficient.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 7 Cables

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 210/243

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board

There are thr ee LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUe Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 211/243

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.

8.12 LEDs on the PAMU Board

There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

8.13 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board

There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.15 LEDs on the POUc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

8.16 LEDs on the SCUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

8.19 LEDs on the UOIa Board

There are three LEDs on the UOIa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

8.20 LEDs on the UOIc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the UOIc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 212/243

8.1 LEDs on the AEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the AEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the AEUa board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the AEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.2 LEDs on the AOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the AOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the AOUa board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the AOUa board

LED Color Status DescriptionRUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 213/243

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.3 LEDs on the AOUc Board

There are four types of LEDs on the AOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the AOUc board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the AOUc boardLED Colo

rStatus Description

RUN Gree

n

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree

n

ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree

n

ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals properly.

 

8.4 LEDs on the DPUb Board

There are three LEDs on the DPUb board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUb board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 214/243

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is

abnormal.

 

8.5 LEDs on the DPUe BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUe board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUe board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUe board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is

abnormal.

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 215/243

8.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board

Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 216/243

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Orange OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board

There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for  

1s

The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the

 board is faulty.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 217/243

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

 

8.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board

There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standbymode.

 

8.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board

There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),

and ACT (optical port LED).

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 218/243

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (optical

 port LED)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical

 port LED)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.11 LEDs on the OMUa Board

There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and HD.

Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the OMUa board.

Table 8-11 LEDs on the OMUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is being started.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 219/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 220/243

8.13 LEDs on the PEUa Board

There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active

mode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

 

8.14 LEDs on the POUa Board

There are three LEDs on the POUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the POUa board.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the POUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 221/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 222/243

Table 8-16 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading

state.

ON There is power supply, but

the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,

or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.

OFF The board is in standby

mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data

transmission over the

Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission

over the Ethernet port.

 

8.17 LEDs on the SPUa Board

Among all the LEDs on the SPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the SPUa board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the SPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 223/243

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the

Ethernet port)

Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the

Ethernet port)

Green OFF There is no data transmission over  

the Ethernet port.Blinking There is data transmission over the

Ethernet port.

 

8.18 LEDs on the SPUb Board

Among all the LEDs on the SPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SPUb

 board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet

 port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the SPUb board.

Table 8-18 LEDs on the SPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF

for 0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the

 board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 224/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 225/243

Table 8-20 LEDs on the UOIc board

LED Color

Status Description

RUN Green

ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for 

0.125s

The board is in loading state.

ON There is power supply, but the board

is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board

is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Gree

n

ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Gree

n

ON The STM-1 port does not receive

signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals

 properly.

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 226/243

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack 

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board

The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board

The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switchesare used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board

The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

9.8 DIP Switches on the POUa Board

The POUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches

are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 227/243

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack

The DIP switch on the subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch

The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the

DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack .

Appearance

Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack 

 

Description about the DIP Switch

The DIP switch on the su brack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The

higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 228/243

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the

least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant

 bit)

Startup type of the subrack, generally set to OFF.

 

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd

number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:

1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.

2. Set bit 7 to ON.

3. Set bit 8 to OFF.

4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8

remains unchanged.

l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.

l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 5 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 9-2

describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 229/243

SubrackNo.

Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OFF ON ON ON ON OFF

 

9.2 DIP Switches on the AEUa Board

The AEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Layout of the DIP Switches

Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 230/243

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 231/243

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-2, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-2 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the AEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

Description of the DIP Switches

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the AEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-3 describes S2, S4, S6,

S8, and S10.

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the AEUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 24

to 31

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 16

to 23

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 0

to 7

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 232/243

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S8 1-8 TX ground switch

of E1s/T1s/J1s 8

to 15

ON Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the working

mode to other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for  

setting the

working mode,

consisting of two

 bits

(ON, ON) Setting the working

mode to E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the working

mode to E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the working

mode to T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the working

mode to J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.3 DIP Switches on the AOUa Board

The AOUa board provides two DIP switches, both of which are labeled S1. The two DIP switches

are used to set the mode of the two STM-1/OC-3 optical ports.

Layout of the DIP Switches

Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 233/243

Figure 9-3 Layout of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

CAUTION

All DIP switches of the AOUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is

faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP SwitchesTable 9-4 describes the DIP switches on the AOUa board.

Table 9-4 Description of the DIP switches on the AOUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode to JTAG

configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode to CPU slave parallel

configuration

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 234/243

DIP Switch Bit Setting ofDIP Bit

Meaning 

3 ON Setting working mode to T1 mode

OFF Setting working mode to E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped path to AU3

OFF Setting the mapped path to AU4

5 ON Setting the information structure to TU11

OFF Setting the information structure to TU12

6 ON SONET

OFF SDH

7 - Reserved

8 - Reserved

 

NOTE

All the bits of the two DIP switches are set to OFF by default.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board

The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

 

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table

9-5.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 235/243

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board

The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 236/243

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 237/243

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom

 plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.

l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two

square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-

 board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn

inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or 

S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of 

S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.

l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between

the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by

command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET

E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,

E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for 

 balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must

also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced

mode.

l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals

are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair 

cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding

of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1

 balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-6 describes the DIP

switches on the PEUa board.

Table 9-6 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 238/243

DIPSwitch

Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch

Meaning 

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of  

E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15

ON Setting the

working mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

OFF Setting the

working mode to

other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,

consisting of two bits

(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode to

E1 unbalanced

mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the

working mode to

E1 balanced

mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the

working mode to

J1 mode

 

NOTE

All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 are

set to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board

The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP

switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board

is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 239/243

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 9-7. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch Description

SW1 1 (the least significant

 bit)

OFF 1

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)

Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

 

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in

Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the

address of the PFCU board is 4.

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 240/243

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch

Description

SW1 1 (the least significant bit)

ON 0

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant

 bit)

ON 0

 

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

9.7 Pins on the PFCB Board

The PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,

these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of these

 pins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.

Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)

Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.

Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board

 

To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 9-9.

Table 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

PinNumber

1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16

Connec

ted to

 jumper

 No No No No Yes No No No

 

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 241/243

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 242/243

Figure 9-10 Layout of the DIP switches on the POUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

 

CAUTION

All the DIP switches on the POUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel

is faced to and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Description of the DIP SwitchesTable 9-11 describes the DIP switches on the POUa board.

Table 9-11 Description of the DIP switches on the POUa board

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning  

S1 1-2 (ON, ON) Setting loading mode

to JTAG configuration

(OFF, OFF) Setting loading mode

to CPU slave parallel

configuration

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Issue 10 (2012-06-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

7/30/2019 BSC6900UMTS Hardware Description

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/bsc6900umts-hardware-description 243/243

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Bit Meaning  

3 ON Setting working mode

to T1 mode

OFF Setting working modeto E1 mode

4 ON Setting the mapped

 path to AU3

BSC6900 UMTS

Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components